Red Hat Training

A Red Hat training course is available for Red Hat Enterprise Linux

Installation Guide

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5

for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0

版 5.0

Logo

摘要

This Installation Guide documents relevant information regarding the installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0

简​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​

欢​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide》​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTML、​​​​​​​PDF 版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​: http://www.redhat.com/docs/。​​​​​​​

注意

Although this manual reflects the most current information possible, read the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Release Notes for information that may not have been available prior to the documentation being finalized. The Release Notes can be found on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1, online at http://www.redhat.com/docs/, or in the /usr/share/doc/redhat-release-notes-5<variant>/ directory after installation, where <variant> is Server, Client, or Desktop.

1. 与​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

本​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​:
第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 32 和​​​​​​​ 64 位​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ IBM POWER 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ IBM System z 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 的​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
第​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​绍​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​Red Hat Network注​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
第​​​​​​​五​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​“​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​恢​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​”​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
第​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ Kickstart、​​​​​​​PXE 和​​​​​​​ Diskless 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2. 还​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​

The Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide is part of Red Hat's ongoing commitment to provide useful and timely support and information to Red Hat Enterprise Linux users.

2.1. 发​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​馈​​​​​​​

If you spot a typo in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide, or if you have thought of a way to make this manual better, we would love to hear from you! Submit a report in Bugzilla (http://bugzilla.redhat.com/bugzilla/) against the component Installation_Guide (Product: Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Version: 5.0).
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​书​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​尽​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​详​​​​​​​细​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​阐​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​落​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​轻​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

3. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 在​​​​​​​线​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ www.redhat.com/docs 上​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​涵​​​​​​​盖​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide》​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
本​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTML、​​​​​​​PDF 版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​: http://www.redhat.com/docs/。​​​​​​​

注意

Although this manual reflects the most current information possible, read the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Release Notes for information that may not have been available prior to the documentation being finalized. The Release Notes can be found on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1, online at http://www.redhat.com/docs/, or in the /usr/share/doc/redhat-release-notes-5<variant>/ directory after installation, where <variant> is Server, Client, or Desktop.

部分 I. x86、​​​​​​​AMD64、​​​​​​​Intel® 64 和​​​​​​​ Itanium - 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​

Intel 和​​​​​​​ AMD 32 位​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ 64 位​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​》​​​​​​​讨​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​故​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​涉​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 1 章 Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

1.1. Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 和​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ x86 机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​,成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:
  1. 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ EFI(Extensible Firmware Interface,可​​​​​​​扩​​​​​​​展​​​​​​​固​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​)Shell。​​​​​​​
  2. 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ LS-120 软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 和​​​​​​​ ELILO 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

1.2. Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​ — EFI Shell

在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​ EFI Shell、​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
EFI Shell 是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ EFI 协​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​脚​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ DOS 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​仿​​​​​​​,只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​ FAT16 (VFAT) 格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
EFI Shell 还​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​:edit、​​​​​​​type、​​​​​​​cp、​​​​​​​rm、​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ mkdir。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ help。​​​​​​​
EFI Shell 中​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​叫​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​ ELILO 的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ EFI 的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ URL 中​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://developer.intel.com/technology/efi/index.htm

1.2.1. Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​ — EFI 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​

map 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​举​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ EFI 能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​识​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​ EFI shell 时​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​探​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​:
  1. LS-120 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​)
  2. 主​​​​​​​ IDE 接​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IDE 硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​
  3. 次​​​​​​​ IDE 接​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IDE 硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​
  4. SCSI 接​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​
  5. IDE 接​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​
  6. SCSI 接​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​轮​​​​​​​询​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
map
其​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​探​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ FAT16 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ IDE 硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ SCSI 硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ IDE 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,最​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ SCSI 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,map 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​:
Device mapping table   
	fs0  : VenHw(Unknown Device:00)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	fs1  : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	fs2  : VenHw(Unknown Device:FF)/CDROM(Entry1)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	blk0 : VenHw(Unknown Device:00)   
	blk1 : VenHw(Unknown Device:00)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	blk2 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)   
	blk3 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)   
	blk4 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part2,Sig00000000)   
	blk5 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part3,Sig00000000)   
	blk6 : VenHw(Unknown Device:80)/HD(Part3,Sig00000000)/HD(Part1,Sig725F7772)  
	blk7 : VenHw(Unknown Device:FF)   
	blk8 : VenHw(Unknown Device:FF)/CDROM(Entry1)   
	blk9 : VenHw(Unknown Device:FF)/CDROM(Entry1)/HD(Part1,Sig00000000)
在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,LS-120 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​举​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ fs 开​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ EFI 能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ FAT16 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​举​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ blk 开​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ EFI 能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​识​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​照​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​探​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,fs0 是​​​​​​​ LS-120 上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,fs1 是​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,fs2 是​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

1.2.2. Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​ — EFI 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

当​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ Linux 在​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ FAT16 (VFAT) 格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ ELILO 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​(elilo.conf)。​​​​​​​elilo.conf 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 2 章 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​

2.1. 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​?

2.2. 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​兼​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​吗​​​​​​​?

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​老​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​兼​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​近​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​年​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​兼​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​术​​​​​​​规​​​​​​​范​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​乎​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​天​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​难​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​证​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​百​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​百​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​兼​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://hardware.redhat.com/hcl/

2.3. 你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​吗​​​​​​​?

Nearly every modern-day operating system (OS) uses disk partitions, and Red Hat Enterprise Linux is no exception. When you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you may have to work with disk partitions. If you have not worked with disk partitions before (or need a quick review of the basic concepts), refer to 第 25 章 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​ before proceeding.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​ OS(如​​​​​​​ Windows、​​​​​​​OS/2、​​​​​​​甚​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux)所​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​离​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,Red Hat Enterprise Linux 至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​专​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(/ and swap)。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,Red Hat Enterprise Linux 至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​专​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(/、​​​​​​​/boot/efi/ 和​​​​​​​ swap)。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​:
  • 有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​[1]的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​
  • 有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​
If you are not sure that you meet these conditions, or if you want to know how to create free disk space for your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation, refer to 第 25 章 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​.

2.4. 您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​吗​​​​​​​?

可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
从​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​购​​​​​​​买​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux产​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​拥​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.4.1. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​

引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ DVD/CD-ROM
If you can boot using the DVD/CD-ROM drive, you can create your own CD-ROM to boot the installation program. This may be useful, for example, if you are performing an installation over a network or from a hard drive. Refer to 第 2.4.2 节 “制​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​” for further instructions.
USB pen drive
If you cannot boot from the DVD/CD-ROM drive, but you can boot using a USB device, such as a USB pen drive, the following alternative boot method is available:
要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ USB pen 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ dd 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​ CD-ROM #1 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /images/ 目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ diskboot.img 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
dd if=diskboot.img of=/dev/sda
你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS 必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ USB 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​奏​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.4.2. 制​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​

isolinux(在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​)现​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​:
Copy the isolinux/ directory from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD or CD #1 into a temporary directory (referred to here as <path-to-workspace>) using the following command:
cp -r <path-to-cd>/isolinux/ <path-to-workspace>
Change directories to the <path-to-workspace> directory you have created:
cd <path-to-workspace>
请​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​权​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​:
chmod u+w isolinux/*
最​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​:
mkisofs -o file.iso -b isolinux.bin -c boot.cat -no-emul-boot \  
-boot-load-size 4 -boot-info-table -R -J -v -T isolinux/

注意

以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​刷​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Burn the resulting ISO image (named file.iso and located in <path-to-workspace>) to a CD-ROM as you normally would.

2.5. 筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

注意

Make sure an installation CD (or any other type of CD) is not in your system's CD/DVD drive if you are performing a network-based installation. Having a CD in the drive may cause unexpected errors.
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​(NFS、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​HTTP)还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​贮​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​HTTP 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​独​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ ISO、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​报​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​(许​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​刻​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​(Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​:在​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ elilo):
linux mediacheck

注意

在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ /location/of/disk/space。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ FTP、​​​​​​​NFS 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ /export/directory。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/location/of/disk/space 可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​叫​​​​​​​ /var/isos 的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​, /export/directory 将​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ /var/www/html/rhel5。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​充​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​:
    • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ DVD:
      dd if=/dev/dvd of=/location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso
      这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ dvd 指​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ DVD 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​:
    • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ CD-ROM:
      dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso
      在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,cdrom 指​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ CD 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​,X 是​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​ 1 开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​推​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.5.1. 筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​ FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​, iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:
  • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ DVD:
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
    在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,/export/directory 将​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 作​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ CDROM:
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso /export/directory/diskX/
    对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ CDROM ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
    mount -o loop /var/isos/disk1.iso /var/www/html/rhel5-install/disk1/
之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,确​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​ /export/directory 目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​证​​​​​​​客​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.5.2. 筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​,没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ NFS 可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ NFS 的​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ DVD:
    mv /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
  • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ CDROM:
    mv /location/of/disk/space/disk*.iso /export/directory/
在​​​​​​​ /etc/exports 里​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​ /export/directory 通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ NFS 输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​:
/export/directory client.ip.address(ro,no_root_squash)
要​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
/export/directory *(ro,no_root_squash)
启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​ NFS 守​​​​​​​护​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs start 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ NFS 已​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs reload)。​​​​​​​
根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 部​​​​​​​署​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​》​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​ NFS 共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

2.6. 筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

注意

硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ ext2、​​​​​​​ext3、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ FAT 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ reiserfs,你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO(或​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​)映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​精​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​(二​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​)存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​集​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​ — 从​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​ DVD)中​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​(对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ DVD 只​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​):
    dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/tmp/file-name.iso
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​ — 把​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    在​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(该​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​md5sum 程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ ISO 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​报​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​(许​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​刻​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​(Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo):
linux mediacheck
除​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​叫​​​​​​​ updates.img 的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​anaconda。​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​ anaconda RPM 软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ install-methods.txt 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​途​​​​​​​径​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​怎​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[1] 未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​味​​​​​​​着​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​划​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​独​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 3 章 System Specifications List

最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ http://hardware.redhat.com/hcl/ 上​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
This system specifications list will help you keep a record of your current system settings and requirements. Enter the corresponding information about your system in the list provided below as a handy reference to help make your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation goes smoothly.
  • hard drive(s): type, label, size; e.g. IDE hda=40 GB
  • partitions: map of partitions and mount points; e.g. /dev/hda1=/home, /dev/hda2=/ (fill this in once you know where they will reside)
  • memory: amount of RAM installed on your system; e.g. 512 MB, 1 GB
  • CD-ROM: interface type; e.g. SCSI, IDE (ATAPI)
  • SCSI adapter: if present, make and model number; e.g. BusLogic SCSI Adapter, Adaptec 2940UW
  • network card: if present, make and model number; e.g. Tulip, 3COM 3C590
  • mouse: type, protocol, and number of buttons; e.g. generic 3 button PS/2 mouse, MouseMan 2 button serial mouse
  • monitor: make, model, and manufacturer specifications; e.g. Optiquest Q53, ViewSonic G773
  • video card: make, model number and size of VRAM; e.g. Creative Labs Graphics Blaster 3D, 8MB
  • sound card: make, chipset and model number; e.g. S3 SonicVibes, Sound Blaster 32/64 AWE
  • IP, DHCP, and BOOTP addresses
  • netmask
  • gateway IP address
  • one or more name server IP addresses (DNS)
  • domain name: the name given to your organization; e.g. example.com
  • hostname: the name of your computer; your personal choice of names; e.g. cookie, southpark
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​熟​​​​​​​悉​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​联​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​术​​​​​​​语​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​联​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​员​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 4 章 在​​​​​​​ Intel® 或​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

This chapter explains how to perform a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation from the DVD/CD-ROM, using the graphical, mouse-based installation program. The following topics are discussed:
  • Becoming familiar with the installation program's user interface
  • 启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​
  • 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​
  • 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​(语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​)
  • 结​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

4.1. 图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

If you have used a graphical user interface (GUI) before, you are already familiar with this process; use your mouse to navigate the screens, click buttons, or enter text fields.
You can also navigate through the installation using the keyboard. The Tab key allows you to move around the screen, the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through lists, + and - keys expand and collapse lists, while Space and Enter selects or removes from selection a highlighted item. You can also use the Alt+X key command combination as a way of clicking on buttons or making other screen selections, where X is replaced with any underlined letter appearing within that screen.

注意

If you are using an x86, AMD64, or Intel® 64 system, and you do not wish to use the GUI installation program, the text mode installation program is also available. To start the text mode installation program, use the following command at the boot: prompt:
linux text
It is highly recommended that installs be performed using the GUI installation program. The GUI installation program offers the full functionality of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program, including LVM configuration which is not available during a text mode installation.
Users who must use the text mode installation program can follow the GUI installation instructions and obtain all needed information.

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
elilo linux text

4.1.1. 虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​仅​​​​​​​仅​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​诊​​​​​​​断​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​五​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​(virtual console)中​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​远​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
These virtual consoles can be helpful if you encounter a problem while installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Messages displayed on the installation or system consoles can help pinpoint a problem. Refer to 表 4.1 “控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​,击​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​,和​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​” for a listing of the virtual consoles, keystrokes used to switch to them, and their contents.
一​​​​​​​般​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​,除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​诊​​​​​​​断​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​离​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​(图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

表 4.1. 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​,击​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​,和​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​

控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​ 击​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​ 内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​
1 ctrl+alt+f1 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​
2 ctrl+alt+f2 shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​
3 ctrl+alt+f3 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​志​​​​​​​(安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​)
4 ctrl+alt+f4 与​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​
5 ctrl+alt+f5 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​
6 ctrl+alt+f6 X 图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​

4.2. 文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

The Red Hat Enterprise Linux text mode installation program uses a screen-based interface that includes most of the on-screen widgets commonly found on graphical user interfaces. 图 4.1 “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration, and 图 4.2 “Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid, illustrate the screens that appear during the installation process.

注意

虽​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​十​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​充​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​旧​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​循​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,LVM(Logical Volume Management,逻​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​)磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LVM 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration

图 4.1. Installation Program Widgets as seen in Boot Loader Configuration

Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid

图 4.2. Installation Program Widgets as seen in Disk Druid

  • 窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​ — 在​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​(本​​​​​​​书​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​,dialog)。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​叠​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​;在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​流​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​毕​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​,允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 复​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​箱​​​​​​​ — 复​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​箱​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​箱​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​星​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​(已​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​),要​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​(未​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​箱​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​ Space 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ — 文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​)编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ — 文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​箱​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​滚​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ 箭​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​滚​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​滚​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ # 字​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​拖​​​​​​​拉​​​​​​​滚​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Scroll Bar — Scroll bars appear on the side or bottom of a window to control which part of a list or document is currently in the window's frame. The scroll bar makes it easy to move to any part of a file.
  • 按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ — 按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​流​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ Tab 键​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​逐​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​推​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​突​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​ — 虽​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​(和​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​)某​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​颜​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.2.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​航​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​达​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 向​​​​​​​左​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​右​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​箭​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Tab 和​​​​​​​ Shift-Tab 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​循​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​摘​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To "press" a button, position the cursor over the button (using Tab, for example) and press Space or Enter. To select an item from a list of items, move the cursor to the item you wish to select and press Enter. To select an item with a checkbox, move the cursor to the checkbox and press Space to select an item. To deselect, press Space a second time.
按​​​​​​​ F12 来​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​;这​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​待​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​随​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​(这​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​预​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

4.3. 启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

To start, first make sure that you have all necessary resources for the installation. If you have already read through 第 2 章 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​, and followed the instructions, you should be ready to start the installation process. When you have verified that you are ready to begin, boot the installation program using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD or CD-ROM #1 or any boot media that you have created.

注意

Occasionally, some hardware components require a driver diskette during the installation. A driver diskette adds support for hardware that is not otherwise supported by the installation program. Refer to 第 7 章 用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Intel® 或​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​ for more information.

4.3.1. 在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(这​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​):
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ — 你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 可​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ — 你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • USB pen 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​ — 你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ USB 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • PXE boot via network — Your machine supports booting from the network. This is an advanced installation path. Refer to 第 31 章 PXE 网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ for additional information on this method.
插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ USB 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

要​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 或​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​计​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​刚​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​,告​​​​​​​诉​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ BIOS 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ BIOS 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,查​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ C、​​​​​​​A 或​​​​​​​ A、​​​​​​​C(根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ [C] 还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​ [A] 中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ C 或​​​​​​​ A(你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​典​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​计​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​寻​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
退​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ BIOS 前​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​详​​​​​​​细​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​带​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​档​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
片​​​​​​​刻​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​联​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​恰​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​:
  • 当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​钟​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​采​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​微​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​延​​​​​​​迟​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Normally, you only need to press Enter to boot. Be sure to watch the boot messages to review if the Linux kernel detects your hardware. If your hardware is properly detected, continue to the next section. If it does not properly detect your hardware, you may need to restart the installation and use one of the boot options provided in 第 8 章 Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​.

4.3.2. 在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

Your Itanium system should be able to boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program directly from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1. If your Itanium cannot boot the installation program from the CD-ROM (or if you want to perform a hard drive, NFS, FTP, or HTTP installation) you must boot from an LS-120 diskette. Refer to 第 4.3.2.2 节 “从​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​” for more information.

4.3.2.1. 从​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​,遵​​​​​​​循​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​:
  1. 取​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 从​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​EFI Shell」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. At the Shell> prompt, change to the file system on the CD-ROM. For example, in the above sample map output, the system partition on the CD-ROM is fs1. To change to the fs1 file system, type fs1: at the prompt.
  4. 键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo linux 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.3.2.2. 从​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Itanium 无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​ CD 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ LS-120 软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​NFS、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ LS-120 软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ images/boot.img 来​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ LS-120 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux 中​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
dd if=boot.img of=/dev/hda bs=180k
把​​​​​​​ boot.img 替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​径​​​​​​​,把​​​​​​​ /dev/hda 替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​循​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​:
  1. 插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​ boot.img 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​,还​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​NFS、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  2. 从​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​EFI Shell」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. At the Shell> prompt, change the device to the LS-120 drive by typing the command fs0:, using the example map output above.
  4. 键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo linux 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.3.3. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​

对​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​讨​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
For Itanium users:
要​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​:
elilo linux option
For x86, AMD64, and Intel® 64 users:
要​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 或​​​​​​​ Intel® 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​范​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • To perform a text mode installation, at the installation boot prompt, type:
    linux text
  • ISO images have an md5sum embedded in them. To test the checksum integrity of an ISO image, at the installation boot prompt, type:
    linux mediacheck
    安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​强​​​​​​​烈​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ ISO、​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Also in the images/ directory is the boot.iso file. This file is an ISO image than can be used to boot the installation program. To use the boot.iso, your computer must be able to boot from its CD-ROM drive, and its BIOS settings must be configured to do so. You must then burn the boot.iso file onto a recordable/rewriteable CD-ROM.
  • If you need to perform the installation in serial mode, type the following command:
    linux console=<device>
    文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​:
    linux text console=<device>
    In the above command, <device> should be the device you are using (such as ttyS0 or ttyS1). For example, linux text console=ttyS0.
    Text mode installations using a serial terminal work best when the terminal supports UTF-8. Under UNIX and Linux, Kermit supports UTF-8. For Windows, Kermit '95 works well. Non-UTF-8 capable terminals works as long as only English is used during the installation process. An enhanced serial display can be used by passing the utf8 command as a boot-time option to the installation program. For example:
    linux console=ttyS0 utf8

4.3.3.1. 内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​

选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ anaconda 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​,输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:
linux updates
文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​:
linux text updates
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​(错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ rhupdates/ 目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,则​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.4. 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​

你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​?可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​:
DVD/CD-ROM
If you have a DVD/CD-ROM drive and the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD-ROMs or DVD you can use this method. Refer to 第 4.5 节 “从​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​”, for DVD/CD-ROM installation instructions.
硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​
If you have copied the Red Hat Enterprise Linux ISO images to a local hard drive, you can use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod boot option). Refer to 第 4.6 节 “从​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​”, for hard drive installation instructions.
NFS
If you are installing from an NFS server using ISO images or a mirror image of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you can use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod boot option). Refer to 第 4.8 节 “通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​” for network installation instructions. Note that NFS installations may also be performed in GUI mode.
FTP
If you are installing directly from an FTP server, use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod boot option). Refer to 第 4.9 节 “通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ FTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​”, for FTP installation instructions.
HTTP
If you are installing directly from an HTTP (Web) server, use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod boot option). Refer to 第 4.10 节 “通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​”, for HTTP installation instructions.

4.5. 从​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

To install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a DVD/CD-ROM, place the DVD or CD #1 in your DVD/CD-ROM drive and boot your system from the DVD/CD-ROM.
The installation program then probes your system and attempts to identify your CD-ROM drive. It starts by looking for an IDE (also known as an ATAPI) CD-ROM drive.

注意

To abort the installation process at this time, reboot your machine and then eject the boot media. You can safely cancel the installation at any point before the About to Install screen. Refer to 第 4.24 节 “准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​” for more information.
If your CD-ROM drive is not detected, and it is a SCSI CD-ROM, the installation program prompts you to choose a SCSI driver. Choose the driver that most closely resembles your adapter. You may specify options for the driver if necessary; however, most drivers detect your SCSI adapter automatically.
If the DVD/CD-ROM drive is found and the driver loaded, the installer will present you with the option to perform a media check on the DVD/CD-ROM. This will take some time, and you may opt to skip over this step. However, if you later encounter problems with the installer, you should reboot and perform the media check before calling for support. From the media check dialog, continue to the next stage of the installation process (refer to 第 4.11 节 “欢​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux”).

4.5.1. 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​ IDE 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​怎​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​办​​​​​​​?

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ IDE(ATAPI)光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​,反​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​询​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​尝​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ linux hdX=cdrom。​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​连​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,把​​​​​​​ X 替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​:
  • a — 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,主​​​​​​​
  • b — 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,次​​​​​​​
  • c — 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,主​​​​​​​
  • d — 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ IDE 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,次​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​)第​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​派​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.6. 从​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

The Select Partition screen applies only if you are installing from a disk partition (that is, if you selected Hard Drive in the Installation Method dialog). This dialog allows you to name the disk partition and directory from which you are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​

图 4.3. 硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​

Enter the device name of the partition containing the Red Hat Enterprise Linux ISO images. This partition must be formatted with a ext2 or vfat filesystem, and cannot be a logical volume. There is also a field labeled Directory holding images.
If the ISO images are in the root (top-level) directory of a partition, enter a /. If the ISO images are located in a subdirectory of a mounted partition, enter the name of the directory holding the ISO images within that partition. For example, if the partition on which the ISO images is normally mounted as /home/, and the images are in /home/new/, you would enter /new/.
After you have identified the disk partition, the Welcome dialog appears.

4.7. 执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,「​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ TCP/IP」​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​询​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​ IP 和​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ DHCP 或​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​掩​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ IPv4 或​​​​​​​ IPv6 信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ IPv4 信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
TCP/IP 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

图 4.4. TCP/IP 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

4.8. 通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

NFS 对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ NFS 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​NFS 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​譬​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ example.com 域​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ eastcoast 主​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​NFS 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​ 字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ eastcoast.example.com。​​​​​​​
Next, enter the name of the exported directory. If you followed the setup described in 第 2.5 节 “筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​”, you would enter the directory /export/directory/.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ NFS 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​树​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​镜​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​,输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​树​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​(Installation Key)来​​​​​​​决​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​则​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
NFS 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​

图 4.5. NFS 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ NFS 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​,输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​欢​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.9. 通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ FTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

FTP 对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ FTP 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​FTP」​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​ FTP 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
FTP 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​

图 4.6. FTP 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​

输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ FTP 站​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ variant/ 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​譬​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ FTP 站​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/variant;/,请​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/(这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ arch 应​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ i386、​​​​​​​ia64、​​​​​​​ppc、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ s390,variant 是​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ Client、​​​​​​​Server、​​​​​​​Workstation 等​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​欢​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​达​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​树​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​,执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
mkdir discX  
mount -o loop RHEL5-discX.iso discX

4.10. 通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

HTTP 对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ HTTP 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​HTTP」​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​ HTTP 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTTP 站​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ IP 地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ variant/ 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​譬​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ HTTP 站​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/variant/,则​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /mirrors/redhat/arch/(这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ arch 应​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ i386、​​​​​​​ia64、​​​​​​​ppc、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ s390,variant 是​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ Client、​​​​​​​Server、​​​​​​​Workstation 等​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
HTTP 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​

图 4.7. HTTP 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​

接​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​欢​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​达​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​树​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​,执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
mkdir discX  
mount -o loop RHEL5-discX.iso discX

4.11. 欢​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux

「​​​​​​​欢​​​​​​​迎​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​ 屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 的​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.12. 语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​

Using your mouse, select a language to use for the installation (refer to 图 4.8 “语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​”).
你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​恰​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​恰​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​

图 4.8. 语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​

当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​恰​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​ 来​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.13. 键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

用​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​,U.S. English)(参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

图 4.9. 键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

注意

要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-keyboard 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.14. 输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​(Installation Number)

Enter your Installation Number (refer to 图 4.10 “Installation Number”). This number will determine the package selection set that is available to the installer. If you choose to skip entering the installation number you will be presented with a basic selection of packages to install later on.
Installation Number

图 4.10. Installation Number

4.15. 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

Partitioning allows you to divide your hard drive into isolated sections, where each section behaves as its own hard drive. Partitioning is particularly useful if you run multiple operating systems. If you are not sure how you want your system to be partitioned, read 第 25 章 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​ for more information.
On this screen you can choose to create the default layout or choose to manual partition using the 'Create custom layout' option of Disk Druid.
前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​亲​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​,建​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​让​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
You can configure an iSCSI target for installation, or disable a dmraid device from this screen by clicking on the 'Advanced storage configuration' button. For more information refer to 第 4.16 节 “高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​储​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​”.

警告

「​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /var/cache/yum/ 中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​独​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /var/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​(大​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 3.0GB)来​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​纳​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

图 4.11. 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​则​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​:
"The partition table on device hda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive."
你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​识​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ EZ-BIOS 之​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​丢​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​(假​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
无​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.16. 高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​储​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​

高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​储​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​

图 4.12. 高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​储​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ dmraid 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ dmraid 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​素​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​独​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ iSCSI(基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ TCP/IP 的​​​​​​​ SCSI)目​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To configure an ISCSI target invoke the 'Configure ISCSI Parameters' dialog by selecting 'Add ISCSI target' and clicking on the 'Add Drive' button. Fill in the details for the ISCSI target IP and provide a unique ISCSI initiator name to identify this system. Click the 'Add target' button to attempt connection to the ISCSI target using this information.
配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ ISCSI 参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​

图 4.13. 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ ISCSI 参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​

请​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISCSI 目​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​ IP 地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​尝​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​ ISCSI 启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.17. 按​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​(若​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​)这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​权​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​:
  • 「​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​ — 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(这​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ Windows VFAT 或​​​​​​​ NTFS 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

    警告

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​ — 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ Linux 时​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​响​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:VFAT 或​​​​​​​ FAT32 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​闲​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​ — 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,假​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​闲​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

图 4.14. 创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​,将​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​影​​​​​​​响​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

备​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​智​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​举​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​双​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​难​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​,甚​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​丢​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,/boot/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 阵​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​,比​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
/boot/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ RAID 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​审​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​审​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​审​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​审​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 中​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​满​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18. 为​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

If you chose one of the three automatic partitioning options and did not select Review, skip ahead to 第 4.20 节 “网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​”.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​审​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​(点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​),或​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 来​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

请​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LVM(逻​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​)来​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM 只​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​义​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​诉​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​义​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​/或​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

If you have not yet planned how to set up your partitions, refer to 第 25 章 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​ and 第 4.18.4 节 “推​​​​​​​荐​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​”. At a bare minimum, you need an appropriately-sized root partition, and a swap partition equal to twice the amount of RAM you have on the system. Itanium system users should have a /boot/efi/ partition of approximately 100 MB and of type FAT (VFAT), a swap partition of at least 512 MB, and an appropriately-sized root (/) partition.
在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel 64 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

图 4.15. 在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ Disk Druid。​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​隐​​​​​​​晦​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,Disk Druid 能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​典​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.1. 硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​

Disk Druid 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
单​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​突​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​双​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​闲​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Above the display, you can review the Drive name (such as /dev/hda), the Geom (which shows the hard disk's geometry and consists of three numbers representing the number of cylinders, heads, and sectors as reported by the hard disk), and the Model of the hard drive as detected by the installation program.

4.18.2. Disk Druid's Buttons

These buttons control Disk Druid's actions. They are used to change the attributes of a partition (for example the file system type and mount point) and also to create RAID devices. Buttons on this screen are also used to accept the changes you have made, or to exit Disk Druid. For further explanation, take a look at each button in order:
  • 「​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​)都​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​充​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​属​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​闲​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​突​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​闲​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​双​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​闲​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 要​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ RAID 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​RAID」​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​连​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ RAID 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​突​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​ Disk Druid 恢​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​状​​​​​​​态​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​丢​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​RAID」​​​​​​​:用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​冗​​​​​​​余​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​详​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide》​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    要​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ RAID 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​RAID」​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​连​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ RAID 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​LVM」​​​​​​​:允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ LVM 逻​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM(逻​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​贮​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​逻​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​视​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM 管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ — 或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​,磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​详​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide》​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​:LVM 只​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    要​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​ LVM 逻​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​(LVM)的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​(LVM)分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​LVM」​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​ LVM 逻​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.3. 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​层​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​义​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​:
  • Device: This field displays the partition's device name.
  • Mount Point/RAID/Volume: A mount point is the location within the directory hierarchy at which a volume exists; the volume is "mounted" at this location. This field indicates where the partition is mounted. If a partition exists, but is not set, then you need to define its mount point. Double-click on the partition or click the Edit button.
  • Type: This field shows the partition's file system type (for example, ext2, ext3, or vfat).
  • 「​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:该​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Size (MB): This field shows the partition's size (in MB).
  • 「​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:该​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:该​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
「​​​​​​​隐​​​​​​​藏​​​​​​​ RAID 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​/LVM 卷​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​员​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAID 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ LVM 卷​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​员​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.4. 推​​​​​​​荐​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​

4.18.4.1. Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​

Unless you have a reason for doing otherwise, we recommend that you create the following partitions for Itanium systems:
  • 一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 100MB)— 挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​initrd 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ ELILO 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

    警告

    你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ VFAT、​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ 100MB 的​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 256MB)— 交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​句​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​,当​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​贮​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ swap。​​​​​​​
    创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​赖​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​素​​​​​​​(按​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​):
    • 在​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 2GB 时​​​​​​​,交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 2GB 的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​,则​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​绝​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 32MB。​​​​​​​
    所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​:
    M = 内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GB 数​​​​​​​,S = 交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GB 数​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​
    If M < 2
    	S = M *2
    Else
    	S = M + 2
    使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ 2GB 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 4GB 的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​,物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ 3GB 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 5GB 交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​计​​​​​​​划​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​(超​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ 32GB),你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • A root partition (3.0 GB - 5.0 GB) — this is where "/" (the root directory) is located. In this setup, all files (except those stored in /boot/efi) are on the root partition.
    3.9GB 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​仅​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​ 5.0GB 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.4.2. x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 位​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​

除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​推​​​​​​​荐​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 位​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​
  • 一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ 256MB)— 交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​句​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​,当​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​贮​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ swap。​​​​​​​
    创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​赖​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​素​​​​​​​(按​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​):
    • 在​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    • 操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 2GB 时​​​​​​​,交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 2GB 的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​,则​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​绝​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 32MB。​​​​​​​
    所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​:
    M = 内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GB 数​​​​​​​,S = 交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GB 数​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​
    If M < 2
    	S = M *2
    Else
    	S = M + 2
    使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ 2GB 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 4GB 的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​,物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ 3GB 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 5GB 交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​计​​​​​​​划​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​(超​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ 32GB),你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​倍​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(100MB)— 挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​(它​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux)、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​展​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ext3 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​纳​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​办​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​,大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ 100MB 的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

    注意

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 1024 个​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​(而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​年​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​),而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​让​​​​​​​ /(根​​​​​​​)分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​余​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

    注意

    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,/boot/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 阵​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​独​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • A root partition (3.0 GB - 5.0 GB) — this is where "/" (the root directory) is located. In this setup, all files (except those stored in /boot) are on the root partition.
    3.0GB 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​仅​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​ 5.0GB 大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.5. 添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

注意

You must dedicate at least one partition for this installation, and optionally more. For more information, refer to 第 25 章 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​.
创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

图 4.16. 创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

  • Mount Point: Enter the partition's mount point. For example, if this partition should be the root partition, enter /; enter /boot for the /boot partition, and so on. You can also use the pull-down menu to choose the correct mount point for your partition. For a swap partition the mount point should not be set - setting the filesystem type to swap is sufficient.
  • File System Type: Using the pull-down menu, select the appropriate file system type for this partition. For more information on file system types, refer to 第 4.18.5.1 节 “文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​”.
  • Allowable Drives: This field contains a list of the hard disks installed on your system. If a hard disk's box is highlighted, then a desired partition can be created on that hard disk. If the box is not checked, then the partition will never be created on that hard disk. By using different checkbox settings, you can have Disk Druid place partitions where you need them, or let Disk Druid decide where partitions should go.
  • 「​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​(MB)」​​​​​​​:输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​(MB)。​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,该​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ 100MB 开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​;若​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​,创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ 100MB。​​​​​​​
  • Additional Size Options: Choose whether to keep this partition at a fixed size, to allow it to "grow" (fill up the available hard drive space) to a certain point, or to allow it to grow to fill any remaining hard drive space available.
    如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ 「​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​(MB)」​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​右​​​​​​​侧​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Force to be a primary partition: Select whether the partition you are creating should be one of the first four partitions on the hard drive. If unselected, the partition is created as a logical partition. Refer to 第 25.1.3 节 “分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​ — 扩​​​​​​​展​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​”, for more information.
  • 「​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​满​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​:如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.5.1. 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​描​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​ext2」​​​​​​​ — ext2 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Unix 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​(常​​​​​​​规​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​链​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​长​​​​​​​达​​​​​​​ 255 个​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​长​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​ext3」​​​​​​​ — ext3 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ ext2 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​优​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​ — 日​​​​​​​志​​​​​​​(journaling)。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​志​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​减​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​崩​​​​​​​溃​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​恢​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​花​​​​​​​费​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ fsck[2] 来​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ext3 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​极​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​推​​​​​​​荐​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​(LVM)」​​​​​​​ — 创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​(LVM)分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ LVM 逻​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LVM 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ LVM 的​​​​​​​详​​​​​​​细​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​ 《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide》​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ RAID」​​​​​​​ — 创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ RAID 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ RAID 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ RAID 的​​​​​​​详​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide》​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​“​​​​​​​RAID(独​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​冗​​​​​​​余​​​​​​​阵​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​)”​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​ — 交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​句​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​额​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide》​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 「​​​​​​​vfat」​​​​​​​ — VFAT 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ Linux 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​ Microsoft Windows 的​​​​​​​ FAT 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​长​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​兼​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Itanuim 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /boot/efi 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.18.6. 编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​双​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

If the partition already exists on your disk, you can only change the partition's mount point. To make any other changes, you must delete the partition and recreate it.

4.18.7. 删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​突​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.19. x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(Boot Loader)的​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​计​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​责​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​权​​​​​​​转​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
GRUB(GRand Unified Bootloader)是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​强​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​GRUB 能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​连​​​​​​​锁​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​(chain-loading)来​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​费​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​专​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​(连​​​​​​​锁​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ DOS 或​​​​​​​ Windows 之​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

图 4.17. 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​ GRUB 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​干​​​​​​​脆​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​覆​​​​​​​盖​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ GRUB,你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​!
Every bootable partition is listed, including partitions used by other operating systems. The partition holding the system's root file system has a Label of Red Hat Enterprise Linux (for GRUB). Other partitions may also have boot labels. To add or change the boot label for other partitions that have been detected by the installation program, click once on the partition to select it. Once selected, you can change the boot label by clicking the Edit button.
在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​旁​​​​​​​边​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

「​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ GRUB 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​箭​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ e 来​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​亲​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​护​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​若​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​减​​​​​​​弱​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​;若​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​物​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​角​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ USB 介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​(若​​​​​​​ BIOS 支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​)引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​计​​​​​​​划​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​决​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​带​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​增​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​毕​​​​​​​,输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​往​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.19.1. 高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

现​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​决​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​:
  • The master boot record (MBR) — This is the recommended place to install a boot loader, unless the MBR already starts another operating system loader, such as System Commander. The MBR is a special area on your hard drive that is automatically loaded by your computer's BIOS, and is the earliest point at which the boot loader can take control of the boot process. If you install it in the MBR, when your machine boots, GRUB presents a boot prompt. You can then boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux or any other operating system that you have configured the boot loader to boot.
  • The first sector of your boot partition — This is recommended if you are already using another boot loader on your system. In this case, your other boot loader takes control first. You can then configure that boot loader to start GRUB, which then boots Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

图 4.18. 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 阵​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ MBR 上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ MBR。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux,你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​(MBR)。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS 所​​​​​​​返​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​,点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ SCSI 适​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​兼​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ SCSI 和​​​​​​​ IDE 适​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ SCSI 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​,改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​挥​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
「​​​​​​​强​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LBA32 (通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​)」​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ 1024 柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LBA32 扩​​​​​​​展​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ 1024 柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 1024 柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

在​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​老​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​ BIOS 无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​ 1024 柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​ 1024 柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ /boot Linux 保​​​​​​​留​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ Linux。​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​ 1024 之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ parted 中​​​​​​​,1024 柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 528MB。​​​​​​​详​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​:
http://www.pcguide.com/ref/hdd/bios/sizeMB504-c.html
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​ Linux 内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.19.2. 救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​

Rescue mode provides the ability to boot a small Red Hat Enterprise Linux environment entirely from boot media or some other boot method instead of the system's hard drive. There may be times when you are unable to get Red Hat Enterprise Linux running completely enough to access files on your system's hard drive. Using rescue mode, you can access the files stored on your system's hard drive, even if you cannot actually run Red Hat Enterprise Linux from that hard drive. If you need to use rescue mode, try the following method:
  • 要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 或​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ linux rescue。​​​​​​​Itanium 用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo linux rescue 来​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide》​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.19.3. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​:
LOADLIN
你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ MS-DOS 中​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Linux。​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​幸​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ MS-DOS 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​ Linux 内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​初​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ SCSI 适​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​达​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​唯​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​途​​​​​​​径​​​​​​​(譬​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​)来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ MS-DOS 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​LOADLIN 在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​页​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​镜​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
SYSLINUX
SYSLINUX 是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ LOADLIN 很​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ MS-DOS 程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​页​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​镜​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
Commercial boot loaders
你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Linux。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,System Commander 和​​​​​​​ Partition Magic 能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ Linux (但​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Linux 根​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ GRUB)。​​​​​​​

注意

LOADLIN 和​​​​​​​ System Commander 都​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.19.4. SMP 主​​​​​​​板​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ GRUB

在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,有​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​:uniprocessor 版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ SMP 版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 里​​​​​​​,系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ SMP 的​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​利​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​,超​​​​​​​线​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ CPU。​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​线​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​ CPU 的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.20. 网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

If you do not have a network device, this screen does not appear during your installation and you should advance to 第 4.21 节 “时​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​”.
网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

图 4.19. 网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​拥​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​弹​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ DHCP(若​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ DHCP 则​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​)来​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​掩​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ IPv6 的​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​缀​​​​​​​),你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​激​​​​​​​活​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​激​​​​​​​活​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ DHCP 客​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​权​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​肯​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​员​​​​​​​联​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​

图 4.20. 编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​

注意

不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​肯​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​联​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​员​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​协​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​(全​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​域​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​),你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​ DHCP(动​​​​​​​态​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​协​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​)自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
最​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ IP 和​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​掩​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DNS 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

即​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​计​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​属​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​借​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ localhost。​​​​​​​

注意

要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-network 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.21. 时​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

Set your time zone by selecting the city closest to your computer's physical location. Click on the map to zoom in to a particular geographical region of the world.
选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​:
  • 用​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​城​​​​​​​市​​​​​​​(用​​​​​​​黄​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​色​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ X 符​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​突​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

图 4.21. 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ UTC 的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​钟​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ UTC」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​属​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-date 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​属​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​属​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ timeconfig 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.22. 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​

设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ Windows NT 机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​员​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​,升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​ RPM,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​维​​​​​​​护​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​权​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​(又​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​)对​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​权​​​​​​​;正​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​维​​​​​​​护​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
根​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​

图 4.22. 根​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​

请​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​若​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​速​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​ su - 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​暂​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​遵​​​​​​​循​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​则​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​减​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​损​​​​​​​害​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

要​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​终​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ su - ,并​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​[3] 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
根​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​六​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​;你​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​;如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​匹​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​住​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​又​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​猜​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​ qwerty、​​​​​​​ password、​​​​​​​ root、​​​​​​​ 123456、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ anteater 都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​典​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​坏​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​混​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​词​​​​​​​典​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​词​​​​​​​汇​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:Aard387vark 或​​​​​​​ 420BMttNT。​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​住​​​​​​​,口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​笔​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,我​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​笔​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​范​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​,都​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​视​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​风​​​​​​​险​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

在​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-rootpassword 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.23. 软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​

你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​,现​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
「​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​,详​​​​​​​细​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​举​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​集​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​带​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​归​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​(譬​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,「​​​​​​​X 窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

Users of Itanium systems who want support for developing or running 32-bit applications are encouraged to select the Compatibility Arch Support and Compatibility Arch Development Support packages to install architecure specific support for their systems.
软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​

图 4.23. 软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​

选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​细​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​

图 4.24. 软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​细​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​

4.24. 准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

4.24.1. 准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 做​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​志​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /root/install.log 中​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​今​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​宁​​​​​​​愿​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​钮​​​​​​​,分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​,软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
To cancel this installation process, press your computer's Reset button or use the Control+Alt+Delete key combination to restart your machine.

4.25. 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​

At this point there is nothing left for you to do until all the packages have been installed. How quickly this happens depends on the number of packages you have selected and your computer's speed.

4.26. 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​

祝​​​​​​​贺​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​!你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​!
安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​(磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​)在​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​弹​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
After your computer's normal power-up sequence has completed, the graphical boot loader prompt appears at which you can do any of the following things:
  • 按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​ — 导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​,接​​​​​​​着​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​ — 导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Do nothing — after the boot loader's timeout period, (by default, five seconds) the boot loader automatically boots the default boot entry.
做​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​恰​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​往​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​卷​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​终​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ login: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ GUI 登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ X 窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​ 5(图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​)中​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​(Setup Agent)」​​​​​​​ 屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​Red Hat Network上​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​让​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​马​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​心​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
For information on registering your Red Hat Enterprise Linux subscription, refer to 第 24 章 激​​​​​​​活​​​​​​​订​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​.

4.27. Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​ — 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​

本​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​描​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux和​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ EFI 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux:
elilo
键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ elilo 后​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/elilo.conf 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​举​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​(文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​举​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​)
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ elilo 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/elilo.conf 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,要​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​叫​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​ linux 的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:
elilo linux
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI 中​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/elilo.conf 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​:
  1. At the Shell> prompt, change devices to the system partition (mounted as /boot/efi in Linux). For example, if fs0 is the system boot partition, type fs0: at the EFI Shell prompt.
  2. Type ls at the fs0:\> to make sure you are in the correct partition.
  3. 然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:
    Shell>type elilo.conf
    该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​实​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​ label 开​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​随​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ elilo 之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

4.27.1. 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​

除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ single 会​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​ mem=1024M 来​​​​​​​强​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 1024 MB 内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​(把​​​​​​​ linux 替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​,把​​​​​​​ option 替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​):
elilo linux option

4.27.2. 自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux

安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI Shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo 和​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux,你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ EFI Boot Manager。​​​​​​​
配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ EFI Boot Manager(可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​):
  1. 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ EFI Boot Manager 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ Boot option maintenance menu。​​​​​​​
  2. 从​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ Add a Boot Option。​​​​​​​
  3. 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Linux 中​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ elilo.efi 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  5. 在​​​​​​​ Enter New Description: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5,或​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ EFI Boot Manager 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  6. 在​​​​​​​ Enter Boot Option Data Type 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​ ELILO 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ N 代​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​ No Boot Option。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​奏​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/elilo.conf 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  7. 对​​​​​​​ Save changes to NVRAM 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​答​​​​​​​ Yes。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​返​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ EFI Boot Maintenance Manager 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  8. 下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​,让​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​顶​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​,方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​箭​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ u 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ d 键​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ Save changes to NVRAM。​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ Exit 来​​​​​​​返​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  9. Optionally, you can change the boot timeout value by choosing Set Auto Boot TimeOut => Set Timeout Value from the Main Menu.
  10. 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ Exit 来​​​​​​​返​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ EFI Boot Manager。​​​​​​​

4.27.2.1. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​脚​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​

推​​​​​​​荐​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ ELILO Boot Manager 来​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​ ELILO 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​额​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​叫​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​ startup.nsh 的​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​脚​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ Linux 的​​​​​​​ elilo 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
startup.nsh 脚​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ /boot/efi 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(/boot/efi/startup.nsh),并​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​:
echo -off your set of commands elilo
You can either create this file after booting into Red Hat Enterprise Linux or use the editor built into the EFI shell. To use the EFI shell, at the Shell> prompt, change devices to the system partition (mounted as /boot/efi in Linux). For example, if fs0 is the system boot partition, type fs0: at the EFI Shell prompt. Type ls to make sure you are in the correct partition. Then type edit startup.nsh. Type the contents of the file and save it.
在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,EFI 就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ startup.nsh 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​停​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​ EFI 载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Ctrl+c。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​返​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ EFI shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[2] fsck 程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​元​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ Linux 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
[3] 根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​维​​​​​​​护​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​普​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,所​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​涉​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 5 章 删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux

要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ x86 体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​卸​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux ,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​(Master Boot Record,MBR)里​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(boot loader)信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

给​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​智​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​举​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​丢​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ DOS 和​​​​​​​ Windows 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Windows fdisk 工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​带​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ undocumented 标​​​​​​​志​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ MBR:/mbr。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​ MBR 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​ DOS 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​:
fdisk /mbr
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​ Linux,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DOS(Windows)fdisk 来​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​“​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​但​​​​​​​又​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​”​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ DOS 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​办​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​识​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​ DOS 以​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​:linux rescue。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​值​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​寻​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​跳​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​跳​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,将​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​ list-harddrives。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​识​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​ MB 为​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​

警告

请​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​丢​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​损​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​ parted。​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​ parted,此​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /dev/hda 是​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​:
parted /dev/hda
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ print 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​判​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​:
print
The print command also displays the partition's type (such as linux-swap, ext2, ext3, and so on). Knowing the type of the partition helps you in determining whether to remove the partition.
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ rm 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,要​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​(minor number)为​​​​​​​ 3 的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​:
rm 3

重要

只​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​ [Enter] 键​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ print 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Linux 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ quit 来​​​​​​​退​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ parted。​​​​​​​
退​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​ parted 后​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ exit 来​​​​​​​退​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​救​​​​​​​援​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Control+Alt+Delete 来​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 6 章 在​​​​​​​ Intel® 或​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​故​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​

该​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​讨​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​见​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​决​​​​​​​办​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.1. 你​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​企​​​​​​​业​​​​​​​ Linux

6.1.1. 无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​,一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​(例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:GRUB:)以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​闪​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
不​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 阵​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ RAID 卡​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 阵​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ MBR 上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​优​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(GRUB 或​​​​​​​ LILO)。​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.1.2. 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​ 11 错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​

一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​ 11 错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​(通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​)通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​味​​​​​​​着​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​ 11 错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​故​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you receive a fatal signal 11 error during your installation, it is probably due to a hardware error in memory on your system's bus. Like other operating systems, Red Hat Enterprise Linux places its own demands on your system's hardware. Some of this hardware may not be able to meet those demands, even if they work properly under another OS.
检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​拥​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​线​​​​​​​勘​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ CPU 缓​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​决​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​案​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​闭​​​​​​​ BIOS 中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ CPU 缓​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​着​​​​​​​调​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​板​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​槽​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​槽​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
另​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​企​​​​​​​业​​​​​​​ Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ ISO、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​报​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​(许​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​刻​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​(Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​:在​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ elilo):
	linux mediacheck
关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​ 11 错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​详​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​:
	http://www.bitwizard.nl/sig11/

6.2. 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

6.2.1. 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​低​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​率​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
One possible solution is to try using the resolution= boot option. This option may be most helpful for laptop users. Another solution to try is the driver= option to specify the driver that should be loaded for your video card. If this works, it should be reported as a bug as the installer has failed to autodetect your videocard. Refer to 第 8 章 Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​ for more information on boot options.

注意

要​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​ frame buffer 的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​尝​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ nofb 启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.3. 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

6.3.1. No devices found to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux 错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​收​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ No devices found to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux 错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ SCSI 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​识​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
您​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​兼​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​

6.3.2. 没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​却​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​溯​​​​​​​追​​​​​​​踪​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​收​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​溯​​​​​​​追​​​​​​​踪​​​​​​​(traceback)错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ scp 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​另​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​远​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​溯​​​​​​​追​​​​​​​踪​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,回​​​​​​​溯​​​​​​​追​​​​​​​踪​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​叫​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​ /tmp/anacdump.txt 的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​框​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ Ctrl+Alt+F2 来​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ tty(虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​),然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ scp 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​远​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /tmp/anacdump.txt 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.3.3. 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

If you receive an error after the Disk Partitioning Setup (第 4.15 节 “磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​”) phase of the installation saying something similar to
The partition table on device hda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive.
你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​识​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ EZ-BIOS 之​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​恢​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​丢​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​(假​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
无​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.3.4. 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​余​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​

你​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ swap 和​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ /(根​​​​​​​)分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​让​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​余​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​满​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ 1024 个​​​​​​​柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ /boot 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​ /(根​​​​​​​)分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​剩​​​​​​​余​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.3.5. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

If you are using Disk Druid to create partitions, but cannot move to the next screen, you probably have not created all the partitions necessary for Disk Druid's dependencies to be satisfied.
你​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​:
  • 一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ /(根​​​​​​​)分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​
  • A <swap> partition of type swap

注意

When defining a partition's type as swap, do not assign it a mount point. Disk Druid automatically assigns the mount point for you.

6.3.6. Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

If you are using Disk Druid to create partitions, but cannot move to the next screen, you probably have not created all the partitions necessary for Disk Druid's dependencies to be satisfied.
你​​​​​​​至​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​:
  • 一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ VFAT 的​​​​​​​ /boot/efi/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​
  • 一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ /(根​​​​​​​)分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​
  • A <swap> partition of type swap

注意

When defining a partition's type as swap, you do not have to assign it a mount point. Disk Druid automatically assigns the mount point for you.

6.3.7. 看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ Python 错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(又​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​ anaconda)可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Python 或​​​​​​​ traceback 错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​败​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​日​​​​​​​志​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 中​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​:
Traceback (innermost last):
File "/var/tmp/anaconda-7.1//usr/lib/anaconda/iw/progress_gui.py", line 20, in run
rc = self.todo.doInstall ()    
File "/var/tmp/anaconda-7.1//usr/lib/anaconda/todo.py", line 1468, in doInstall 
self.fstab.savePartitions ()    
File "fstab.py", line 221, in savePartitions      
sys.exit(0)  
SystemExit: 0   
Local variables in innermost frame:  
self: <fstab.GuiFstab instance at 8446fe0>  
sys: <module 'sys' (built-in)>  
ToDo object:  (itodo  ToDo  p1  (dp2  S'method'  p3  (iimage  CdromInstallMethod  
p4  (dp5  S'progressWindow'  p6   <failed>
在​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,到​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 的​​​​​​​链​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​链​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 自​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​链​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​链​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​败​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​,首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Anaconda 的​​​​​​​勘​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​勘​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
http://www.redhat.com/support/errata/
anaconda 的​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​:
http://rhlinux.redhat.com/anaconda/
You can also search for bug reports related to this problem. To search Red Hat's bug tracking system, go to:
http://bugzilla.redhat.com/bugzilla/
最​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​产​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​联​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​技​​​​​​​术​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​产​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​:
http://www.redhat.com/apps/activate/

6.4. 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

6.4.1. 在​​​​​​​ x86 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GRUB 时​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​ /boot/grub/grub.conf 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​达​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​,把​​​​​​​ grub.conf 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ splashimage 的​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​释​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​释​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ # 字​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​退​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ b 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,grub.conf 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​,方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ grub.conf 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​释​​​​​​​掉​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​)以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.2. 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ X 窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​企​​​​​​​业​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​却​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​桌​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ startx 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​ X 窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​,图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
不​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​ /etc/inittab 这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,只​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​即​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​毕​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​计​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
打​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​账​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ su 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
现​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ gedit /etc/inittab 来​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ gedit 编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​/etc/inittab 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​:
# Default runlevel. The runlevels used by RHS are: 
#   0 - halt (Do NOT set initdefault to this) 
#   1 - Single user mode 
#   2 - Multiuser, without NFS (The same as 3, if you do not have networking) 
#   3 - Full multiuser mode 
#   4 - unused 
#   5 - X11 
#   6 - reboot (Do NOT set initdefault to this) 
#  id:3:initdefault:
要​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​ id:3:initdefault: 这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ 3 改​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ 5。​​​​​​​

警告

请​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ 3 改​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ 5。​​​​​​​
你​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​:
	 id:5:initdefault: 
当​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​满​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Ctrl+Q 键​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​退​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​询​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​击​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.3. 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ X 窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​(GUI)的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​ X(X 窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​)时​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ X 窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ X 窗​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​ GNOME、​​​​​​​KDE、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​皆​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.4. X 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​崩​​​​​​​溃​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ X 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​崩​​​​​​​溃​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​满​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​乏​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​症​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​,运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
df -h
df 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​诊​​​​​​​断​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​满​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ df 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ -h 选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​阅​​​​​​​ df 的​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​书​​​​​​​页​​​​​​​,方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ man df。​​​​​​​
关​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​充​​​​​​​满​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​达​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 100%,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ 90% 或​​​​​​​ 95%。​​​​​​​/home/ 和​​​​​​​ /tmp/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​快​​​​​​​填​​​​​​​满​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​老​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​腾​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​腾​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,试​​​​​​​着​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​普​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ X 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.5. 登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​帐​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​住​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ linux single。​​​​​​​
Itanium 用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ elilo 来​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ x86 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,GRUB 是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ GRUB 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ e 来​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ kernel 开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ e 来​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ kernel 行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​尾​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​,添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​:
	single
按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​退​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ b 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ # 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​符​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ passwd root,它​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ shutdown -r now 来​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
If you cannot remember your user account password, you must become root. To become root, type su - and enter your root password when prompted. Then, type passwd <username>. This allows you to enter a new password for the specified user account.
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​登​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​兼​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​“​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​兼​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​”​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​页​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​:
	http://hardware.redhat.com/hcl/

6.4.6. 你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​识​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​吗​​​​​​​?

有​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​识​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​(RAM)。​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ cat /proc/meminfo 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ /boot/grub/grub.conf 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​:
mem=xxM
把​​​​​​​ xx 替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​拥​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​(以​​​​​​​ MB 为​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ /boot/grub/grub.conf 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​:,
# NOTICE: You have a /boot partition. This means that 
#  all kernel paths are relative to /boot/ 
default=0 
timeout=30 
splashimage=(hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz 
title Red Hat Enterprise Linux (2.6.9-5.EL)         
root (hd0,0)         
kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.9-5.EL ro root=/dev/hda3 mem=128M
重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,grub.conf 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ GRUB 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ e 来​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 您​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​签​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ kernel 的​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ e 来​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ kernel 行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​末​​​​​​​尾​​​​​​​,添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​:
mem=xxM
这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ xx 与​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​退​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
回​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ b 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Itanium 用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ elilo 来​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
请​​​​​​​记​​​​​​​住​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​ xx 替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.7. 您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​肯​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ 「​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-printer 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.8. 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​声​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​听​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​声​​​​​​​音​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​声​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​「​​​​​​​声​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​system-config-soundcard)。​​​​​​​
To use the Sound Card Configuration Tool, choose Main Menu => System => Administration => Soundcard Detection in GNOME, or Main Menu => Administration => Soundcard Detection in KDE. A small text box pops up prompting you for your root password.
您​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ shell 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ system-config-soundcard 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​ 「​​​​​​​声​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ 「​​​​​​​声​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​」​​​​​​​ 无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​(样​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​播​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​,您​​​​​​​仍​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​听​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​音​​​​​​​频​​​​​​​),这​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​声​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

6.4.9. 基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Apache httpd 的​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​/Sendmail 在​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Apache httpd 的​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ Sendmail 挂​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ /etc/hosts 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​:
127.0.0.1  localhost.localdomain  localhost

第 7 章 用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Intel® 或​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​

7.1. 为​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​索​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​:
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ linux dd(Itanium 用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ elilo linux dd)来​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ PCI 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​计​​​​​​​算​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

7.2. 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​底​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​?

驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​互​​​​​​​联​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​,还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​商​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux,你​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​(NFS),使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 或​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​SCSI 适​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​NIC、​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​罕​​​​​​​见​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 时​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​继​​​​​​​续​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​毕​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

7.3. 如​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​

Driver images can be obtained from several sources. They may be included with Red Hat Enterprise Linux, or they may be available from a hardware or software vendor's website. If you suspect that your system may require one of these drivers, you should create a driver diskette or CD-ROM before beginning your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation.
对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ x86 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​,Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​(images/drvnet.img — 网​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ images/drvblock.img — 用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ SCSI 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​见​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​罕​​​​​​​见​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ linux dd=url 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​代​​​​​​​ linux dd 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ url 是​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ HTTP、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ NFS 地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Another option for finding specialized driver information is on Red Hat's website at
在​​​​​​​叫​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​ Bug Fixes 的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​偶​​​​​​​尔​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​链​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

7.3.1. 根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 环​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​:
  1. 在​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​)驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​张​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​白​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​(Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​则​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ LS-120 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  2. 在​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​:drvnet.img)的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​份​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ dd if=drvnet.img of=/dev/fd0 。​​​​​​​

注意

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ USB pen drive 来​​​​​​​添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​实​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​ USB pen drive 并​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ driverdisk.img 复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ USB pen drive 上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
dd if=driverdisk.img of=/dev/sda
然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

7.4. 在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
For example, to specifically load a driver diskette that you have created, begin the installation process by booting from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD #1 (or using boot media you have created). For x86-based systems, at the boot: prompt, enter linux dd if using an x86 or x86-64 system. Refer to 第 4.3.1 节 “在​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® 64 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​” for details on booting the installation program. For Itanium systems, at the Shell> prompt, type elilo linux dd. Refer to 第 4.3.2 节 “在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​” for details on booting the installation program.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​,当​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​稍​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 8 章 Intel® 和​​​​​​​ AMD 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​

该​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​讨​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​

askmethod
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
apic
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ x86 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​绕​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Intel 440GX 芯​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​ BIOS 中​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​普​​​​​​​遍​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
apm=allow_ints
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ x86 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​携​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​脑​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
apm=off
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ x86 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ APM(高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 的​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​(APM)问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​,很​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​崩​​​​​​​溃​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
apm=power_off
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ x86 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​闭​​​​​​​(断​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​)系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​闭​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ SMP 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
apm=realmode_power_off
某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​ BIOS 在​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ x86 的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​闭​​​​​​​(断​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​)机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​崩​​​​​​​溃​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ Windows NT 方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ Windows 95 方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
dd
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
dd=url
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ HTTP、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ NFS 网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
display=ip:0
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​远​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​转​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​,ip 应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​充​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ IP 地​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​想​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ xhost +remotehostname 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ remotehostname 是​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ xhost +remotehostname 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​远​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​终​​​​​​​端​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​授​​​​​​​予​​​​​​​远​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​权​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​人​​​​​​​员​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
driverdisk
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ dd 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
ide=nodma
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ IDE 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ DMA,在​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ IDE 相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
linux upgradeany
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​松​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /etc/redhat-release 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /etc/redhat-release 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 时​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​才​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
mediacheck
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ ISO 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ ISO、​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
mem=xxxm
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​老​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​仅​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ 16MB 内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​较​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​视​​​​​​​频​​​​​​​卡​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​视​​​​​​​频​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,xxx 应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​ MB 为​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​替​​​​​​​换​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nmi_watchdog=1
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​死​​​​​​​锁​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​调​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​锁​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NMI(不​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​蔽​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​断​​​​​​​)中​​​​​​​断​​​​​​​,内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​监​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​ CPU 是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​锁​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​调​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noapic
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ x86 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​诉​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ APIC 芯​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​带​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​良​​​​​​​ APIC(如​​​​​​​ Abit BP6)或​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ BIOS 的​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​板​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ NVIDIA nForce3 芯​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​集​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​ ASUS SK8N)的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​知​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​ IDE 探​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​断​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​送​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noht
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ x86 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​线​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nofb
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​帧​​​​​​​缓​​​​​​​冲​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​,允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​带​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​辅​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nomce
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ x86 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CPU 上​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​诊​​​​​​​断​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​默​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CPU 的​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​我​​​​​​​诊​​​​​​​断​​​​​​​(称​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,Machine Check Exception)。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​早​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Compaq Pentium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​携​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​脑​​​​​​​,尤​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ Radeon IGP 芯​​​​​​​片​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​便​​​​​​​携​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​脑​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nonet
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nopass
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nopcmcia
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​ PCMCIA 控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noprobe
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​,相​​​​​​​反​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
noshell
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ shell。​​​​​​​
nostorage
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​ SCSI 和​​​​​​​ RAID 存​​​​​​​储​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​探​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nousb
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ USB 支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​早​​​​​​​期​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​易​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​,该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
nousbstorage
this command disables the loading of the usbstorage module in the installation program's loader. It may help with device ordering on SCSI systems.
numa=off
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​ AMD64 体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NUMA(Non-Uniform Memory Access,不​​​​​​​规​​​​​​​范​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​ 虽​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ CPU 能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​带​​​​​​​ NUMA 支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NUMA 支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​却​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​尽​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​偏​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ CPU,从​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​减​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​ CPU 间​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​著​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​恢​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​ NUMA 行​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​,指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
reboot=b
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ x86、​​​​​​​AMD64 和​​​​​​​ Intel® EM64T 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​闭​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​,该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​致​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
rescue
resolution=
告​​​​​​​诉​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​视​​​​​​​频​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​辨​​​​​​​率​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ 640x480、​​​​​​​800x600、​​​​​​​1024x768 等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
serial
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​串​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
text
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​禁​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​强​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
updates
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​(错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ rhupdates/ 目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,则​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
updates=
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ URL,用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​ anaconda 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​(错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
vnc
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ VNC 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
vncpassword=
该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​连​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​ VNC 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​密​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 9 章 GRUB 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

When a computer with Red Hat Enterprise Linux is turned on, the operating system is loaded into memory by a special program called a boot loader. A boot loader usually exists on the system's primary hard drive (or other media device) and has the sole responsibility of loading the Linux kernel with its required files or (in some cases) other operating systems into memory.

9.1. 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​架​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​

每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux的​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​:

表 9.1. 不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​ 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​
AMD® AMD64 GRUB
IBM® eServerSystem i OS/400®
IBM® eServerSystem p YABOOT
IBM® System z® z/IPL
IBM® System z® z/IPL
Intel® Itanium ELILO
x86 GRUB
本​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​讨​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ x86 体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux所​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.2. GRUB

GNU GRand Unified Boot loader(GRUB)是​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.2.1. GRUB 和​​​​​​​ x86 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​

GRUB 在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​己​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​:
  1. The Stage 1 or primary boot loader is read into memory by the BIOS from the MBR[4]. The primary boot loader exists on less than 512 bytes of disk space within the MBR and is capable of loading either the Stage 1.5 or Stage 2 boot loader.
  2. 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​,第​​​​​​​ 1.5 阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 某​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 1024 柱​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ LBA 模​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​生​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​ 1.5 阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ MBR 和​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​小​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  3. 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​ GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​递​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  4. 第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ /boot/sysroot/ 里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​ GRUB 决​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​哪​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​权​​​​​​​交​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​称​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​ direct loading,这​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​直​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,Microsoft® Windows® 操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,都​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ chain loading 的​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,MBR 指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​扇​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
GRUB 支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​ direct 和​​​​​​​ chain 装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​乎​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

警告

During installation, Microsoft's DOS and Windows installation programs completely overwrite the MBR, destroying any existing boot loaders. If creating a dual-boot system, it is best to install the Microsoft operating system first.

9.2.2. GRUB 的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​征​​​​​​​

GRUB 包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​优​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ x86 体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​征​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​征​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​:
  • GRUB 在​​​​​​​ x86 机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​真​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​(pre-OS)的​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ 这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​征​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​予​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​收​​​​​​​集​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​灵​​​​​​​活​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​年​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​,很​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ x86 体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​采​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​(pre-OS)的​​​​​​​环​​​​​​​境​​​​​​​,且​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • GRUB supports Logical Block Addressing (LBA) mode. LBA places the addressing conversion used to find files in the hard drive's firmware, and is used on many IDE and all SCSI hard devices. Before LBA, boot loaders could encounter the 1024-cylinder BIOS limitation, where the BIOS could not find a file after the 1024 cylinder head of the disk. LBA support allows GRUB to boot operating systems from partitions beyond the 1024-cylinder limit, so long as the system BIOS supports LBA mode. Most modern BIOS revisions support LBA mode.
  • GRUB can read ext2 partitions. This functionality allows GRUB to access its configuration file, /boot/grub/grub.conf, every time the system boots, eliminating the need for the user to write a new version of the first stage boot loader to the MBR when configuration changes are made. The only time a user needs to reinstall GRUB on the MBR is if the physical location of the /boot/ partition is moved on the disk. For details on installing GRUB to the MBR, refer to 第 9.3 节 “安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ GRUB”.

9.3. 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ GRUB

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​ GRUB 没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ GRUB 之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​明​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide》​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​“​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ RPM 管​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​”​​​​​​​》​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Once the GRUB package is installed, open a root shell prompt and run the command /sbin/grub-install <location>, where <location> is the location that the GRUB Stage 1 boot loader should be installed. For example, the following command installs GRUB to the MBR of the master IDE device on the primary IDE bus:
/sbin/grub-install /dev/hda
下​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​候​​​​​​​,GRUB 图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

重要

如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ GRUB 被​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ RAID 1 阵​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​故​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ URL 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​线​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​支​​​​​​​持​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​决​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​:

9.4. GRUB 术​​​​​​​语​​​​​​​

在​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GRUB 之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​事​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​怎​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ GRUB 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​尤​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.4.1. 设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​

当​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GRUB 引​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​(注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​语​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​讲​​​​​​​,括​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​逗​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​):
(<type-of-device><bios-device-number>,<partition-number>)
The <type-of-device> specifies the type of device from which GRUB boots. The two most common options are hd for a hard disk or fd for a 3.5 diskette. A lesser used device type is also available called nd for a network disk. Instructions on configuring GRUB to boot over the network are available online at http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/manual/.
The <bios-device-number> is the BIOS device number. The primary IDE hard drive is numbered 0 and a secondary IDE hard drive is numbered 1. This syntax is roughly equivalent to that used for devices by the kernel. For example, the a in hda for the kernel is analogous to the 0 in hd0 for GRUB, the b in hdb is analogous to the 1 in hd1, and so on.
The <partition-number> specifies the number of a partition on a device. Like the <bios-device-number>, most types of partitions are numbered starting at 0. However, BSD partitions are specified using letters, with a corresponding to 0, b corresponding to 1, and so on.

注意

GRUB 下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​总​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ 0,而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ 1 开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​犯​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,GRUB 会​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ (hd0) 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​ (hd1) 来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​GRUB 用​​​​​​​ (hd0,0) 引​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​ (hd1,2) 引​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
GRUB 通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​规​​​​​​​则​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​:
  • 不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ IDE 还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ SCSI,所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​母​​​​​​​ hd 开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​ fd 用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​ 3.5 寸​​​​​​​软​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 要​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​逗​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​掉​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​ GRUB 为​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,(hd0) 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,(hd3) 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​四​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ BIOS 里​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ IDE 或​​​​​​​ SCSI 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.4.2. 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​(Blocklist)

当​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ GRUB 里​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​(如​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​),你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​码​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​紧​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​着​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​绝​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​径​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​演​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​:
(<device-type><device-number>,<partition-number>)</path/to/file>
In this example, replace <device-type> with hd, fd, or nd. Replace <device-number> with the integer for the device. Replace </path/to/file> with an absolute path relative to the top-level of the device.
你​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ GRUB 里​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​实​​​​​​​际​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ chain 装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ blocklist。​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​集​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​,块​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​殊​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​语​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,后​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​跟​​​​​​​着​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​点​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​逗​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​隔​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​:
0+50,100+25,200+1
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​ 0 到​​​​​​​ 49、​​​​​​​100 到​​​​​​​ 124 以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ 200。​​​​​​​
当​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ GRUB 来​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​ chain 装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,知​​​​​​​道​​​​​​​怎​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​去​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​写​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​ 0 开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​忽​​​​​​​略​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ chain 装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​:
(hd0,0)+1
下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ GRUB 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ chainloader 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
chainloader +1

9.4.3. 根​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ GRUB

The use of the term root file system has a different meaning in regard to GRUB. It is important to remember that GRUB's root file system has nothing to do with the Linux root file system.
GRUB 根​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​顶​​​​​​​层​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​ (hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz 位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ (hd0,0) 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​(实​​​​​​​际​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ /boot/ 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​顶​​​​​​​层​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​)的​​​​​​​ /grub/ 目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ kernel 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​旦​​​​​​​ Linux 内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​ Linux 用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​熟​​​​​​​悉​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 根​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​;它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Refer to the root and kernel commands in 第 9.6 节 “GRUB 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​” for more information.

9.5. GRUB 界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

GRUB 提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​三​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​层​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​功​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ Linux 内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​:

注意

只​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ 3 秒​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​,才​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Menu Interface
这​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ GRUB 时​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​预​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​名​​​​​​​字​​​​​​​排​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​箭​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​什​​​​​​​么​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​做​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​预​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​ GRUB 会​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
按​​​​​​​ e 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ c 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
Menu Entry Editor Interface
要​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ e 键​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​添​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​(o 在​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,而​​​​​​​ O 则​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​插​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​)、​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​(e)或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​(d)。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​ b 键​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Esc 可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​消​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ c 键​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

For information about changing runlevels using the GRUB menu entry editor, refer to 第 9.8 节 “Changing Runlevels at Boot Time”.
Command Line Interface
命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,但​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​限​​​​​​​度​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Enter 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​似​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ shell 的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​征​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Tab 键​​​​​​​依​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​,Ctrl 键​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​ Ctrl+a 来​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​处​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ Ctrl+e 移​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​末​​​​​​​尾​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,就​​​​​​​象​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ bash shell 里​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​箭​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​Home、​​​​​​​End 和​​​​​​​ Delete 键​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.5.1. 界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​顺​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

当​​​​​​​ GRUB 装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​阶​​​​​​​段​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​首​​​​​​​先​​​​​​​搜​​​​​​​寻​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​绕​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​(bypass screen)就​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 3 秒​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​,GRUB 将​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​,GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​读​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,GRUB 将​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,这​​​​​​​允​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​效​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​,GRUB 会​​​​​​​打​​​​​​​印​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​切​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​因​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​辑​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​ GRUB 报​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​失​​​​​​​败​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​,GRUB 又​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​报​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​并​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.6. GRUB 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​

GRUB 在​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​大​​​​​​​量​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​受​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​;这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​隔​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​:
  • boot — 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​最​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ chain 装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • chainloader </path/to/file> — Loads the specified file as a chain loader. If the file is located on the first sector of the specified partition, use the blocklist notation, +1, instead of the file name.
    下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ chainloader 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    chainloader +1
  • displaymem — 根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​ BIOS 信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​情​​​​​​​况​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​认​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​少​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • initrd </path/to/initrd> — Enables users to specify an initial RAM disk to use when booting. An initrd is necessary when the kernel needs certain modules in order to boot properly, such as when the root partition is formatted with the ext3 file system.
    下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ initrd 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    initrd /initrd-2.6.8-1.523.img
  • install <stage-1> <install-disk> <stage-2> p config-file — Installs GRUB to the system MBR.
    • <stage-1> — Signifies a device, partition, and file where the first boot loader image can be found, such as (hd0,0)/grub/stage1.
    • <install-disk> — Specifies the disk where the stage 1 boot loader should be installed, such as (hd0).
    • <stage-2> — Passes the stage 2 boot loader location to the stage 1 boot loader, such as (hd0,0)/grub/stage2.
    • p <config-file> — This option tells the install command to look for the menu configuration file specified by <config-file>, such as (hd0,0)/grub/grub.conf.

    警告

    install 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​覆​​​​​​​盖​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • kernel </path/to/kernel> <option-1> <option-N> ... — Specifies the kernel file to load when booting the operating system. Replace </path/to/kernel> with an absolute path from the partition specified by the root command. Replace <option-1> with options for the Linux kernel, such as root=/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00 to specify the device on which the root partition for the system is located. Multiple options can be passed to the kernel in a space separated list.
    下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ kernel 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.8-1.523 ro root=/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00
    前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ Linux 的​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ hda5 分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • root (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) — Configures the root partition for GRUB, such as (hd0,0), and mounts the partition.
    下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ root 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​:
    root (hd0,0)
  • rootnoverify (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) — Configures the root partition for GRUB, just like the root command, but does not mount the partition.
你​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​;键​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ help --all 来​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​ GRUB 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​描​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​ http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/manual/ 上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​线​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​档​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.7. GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​

The configuration file (/boot/grub/grub.conf), which is used to create the list of operating systems to boot in GRUB's menu interface, essentially allows the user to select a pre-set group of commands to execute. The commands given in 第 9.6 节 “GRUB 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​” can be used, as well as some special commands that are only available in the configuration file.

9.7.1. 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​

GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ /boot/grub/grub.conf。​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​局​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​位​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​顶​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​,后​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​很​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ Microsoft Windows 2000:
default=0 
timeout=10 
splashimage=(hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz 
hiddenmenu 
title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server (2.6.18-2.el5PAE)         
root (hd0,0)         
kernel /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.18-2.el5PAE ro root=LABEL=/1 rhgb quiet       
initrd /boot/initrd-2.6.18-2.el5PAE.img

# section to load Windows 
title Windows         
rootnoverify (hd0,0)         
chainloader +1
这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​ GRUB 建​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux作​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ 10 秒​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​条​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​针​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​表​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

注​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​,default 被​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ GRUB 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ title 行​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​ Windows 设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​ default=0 修​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ default=1。​​​​​​​
Configuring a GRUB menu configuration file to boot multiple operating systems is beyond the scope of this chapter. Consult 第 9.9 节 “其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​资​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​” for a list of additional resources.

9.7.2. 配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​

下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
  • chainloader </path/to/file> — Loads the specified file as a chain loader. Replace </path/to/file> with the absolute path to the chain loader. If the file is located on the first sector of the specified partition, use the blocklist notation, +1.
  • color <normal-color> <selected-color> — Allows specific colors to be used in the menu, where two colors are configured as the foreground and background. Use simple color names such as red/black. For example:
    color red/black green/blue
  • default=<integer> — Replace <integer> with the default entry title number to be loaded if the menu interface times out.
  • fallback=<integer> — Replace <integer> with the entry title number to try if the first attempt fails.
  • hiddenmenu — 当​​​​​​​超​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ timeout 所​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,阻​​​​​​​止​​​​​​​ GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​显​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​ default 条​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​按​​​​​​​ Esc 键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​看​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​ GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • initrd </path/to/initrd> — Enables users to specify an initial RAM disk to use when booting. Replace </path/to/initrd> with the absolute path to the initial RAM disk.
  • kernel </path/to/kernel> <option-1> <option-N> — Specifies the kernel file to load when booting the operating system. Replace </path/to/kernel> with an absolute path from the partition specified by the root directive. Multiple options can be passed to the kernel when it is loaded.
  • password=<password> — Prevents a user who does not know the password from editing the entries for this menu option.
    Optionally, it is possible to specify an alternate menu configuration file after the password=<password> directive. In this case, GRUB restarts the second stage boot loader and uses the specified alternate configuration file to build the menu. If an alternate menu configuration file is left out of the command, a user who knows the password is allowed to edit the current configuration file.
    关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ GRUB 的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide》​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​“​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​全​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​”​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • root (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) — Configures the root partition for GRUB, such as (hd0,0), and mounts the partition.
  • rootnoverify (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) — Configures the root partition for GRUB, just like the root command, but does not mount the partition.
  • timeout=<integer> — Specifies the interval, in seconds, that GRUB waits before loading the entry designated in the default command.
  • splashimage=<path-to-image> — Specifies the location of the splash screen image to be used when GRUB boots.
  • title group-title — 指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​特​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​起​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​注​​​​​​​释​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​井​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​(#)开​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.8. Changing Runlevels at Boot Time

在​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux里​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​缺​​​​​​​省​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​话​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​改​​​​​​​变​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​别​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​:
  • 当​​​​​​​ GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​绕​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​屏​​​​​​​幕​​​​​​​(bypass screen)出​​​​​​​现​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,按​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​ GRUB 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ 3 秒​​​​​​​钟​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​
  • 按​​​​​​​ a 键​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ kernel 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​附​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • Add <space><runlevel> at the end of the boot options line to boot to the desired runlevel. For example, the following entry would initiate a boot process into runlevel 3:
    grub append> ro root=/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00 rhgb quiet 3

9.9. 其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​资​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​

本​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​ GRUB 的​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​绍​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ GRUB 的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​细​​​​​​​节​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​资​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.9.1. 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​档​​​​​​​

  • /usr/share/doc/grub-<version-number>/ — This directory contains good information about using and configuring GRUB, where <version-number> corresponds to the version of the GRUB package installed.
  • info grub — GRUB info 页​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​员​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​手​​​​​​​册​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ GRUB 及​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ FAQ 文​​​​​​​档​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

9.9.2. 有​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​

  • http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/ — GNU GRUB 项​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​主​​​​​​​页​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​ GRUB 开​​​​​​​发​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​ FAQ。​​​​​​​
  • http://kbase.redhat.com/faq/FAQ_43_4053.shtm — 详​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​非​​​​​​​ Linux 操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • http://www.linuxgazette.com/issue64/kohli.html — 讨​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​头​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ GRUB 的​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​绍​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​章​​​​​​​,包​​​​​​​括​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​ GRUB 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​概​​​​​​​述​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[4] For more on the system BIOS and the MBR, refer to 第 30.2.1 节 “BIOS”.

第 10 章 关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Itanium 和​​​​​​​ Linux 的​​​​​​​额​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​资​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​

其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​资​​​​​​​料​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​万​​​​​​​维​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​几​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​资​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​:
  • http://www.intel.com/products/processor/itanium2/ — 关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Itanium 处​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Intel 网​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​
  • http://developer.intel.com/technology/efi/index.htm?iid=sr+efi — 关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​扩​​​​​​​展​​​​​​​固​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​(Extensible Firmware Interface,EFI)的​​​​​​​ Intel 网​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​
  • http://www.itanium.com/business/bss/products/server/itanium2/index.htm — 关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ Itanium 2 处​​​​​​​理​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Intel 网​​​​​​​站​​​​​​​

部分 II. IBM POWER 体​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​结​​​​​​​构​​​​​​​ - 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​

IBM POWER 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​》​​​​​​​讨​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​故​​​​​​​障​​​​​​​解​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​高​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​第​​​​​​​二​​​​​​​部​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​涉​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 11 章 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​

11.1. 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​升​​​​​​​级​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​?

11.2. IBM eServer System p 和​​​​​​​ System i 的​​​​​​​筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​工​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​

IBM eServer System p 和​​​​​​​ IBM eServer System i 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​许​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​两​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​核​​​​​​​,根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,许​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ System p 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​预​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ HVSI 串​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​控​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​连​​​​​​​接​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ T2 串​​​​​​​口​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,无​​​​​​​论​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ IBM System p 还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ IBM System i,创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​基​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ HMC 上​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​ CPU 和​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​资​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ SCSI 和​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​太​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​资​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​,它​​​​​​​们​​​​​​​既​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​也​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​原​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​HMC 创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​逐​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
For more information on creating the partition, refer to IBM's Infocenter article on Configuring Linux logical partitions available online at: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/eserver/v1r3s/index.jsp?topic=/iphbi/iphbikickoff.htm
If you are using virtual SCSI resources, rather than native SCSI, you must configure a 'link' to the virtual SCSI serving partition, and then configure the virtual SCSI serving partition itself. You create a 'link' between the virtual SCSI client and server slots using the HMC. You can configure a virtual SCSI server on either AIX or i5/OS, depending on which model and options you have.
关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ IBM Redbook 和​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​线​​​​​​​资​​​​​​​源​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​:http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/eserver/v1r3s/index.jsp?topic=/iphbi/iphbirelated.htm
关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​虚​​​​​​​拟​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​ eServer i5 的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​信​​​​​​​息​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​ IBM Redbook SG24-6388-01:《​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ IBM System i 平​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​实​​​​​​​施​​​​​​​ POWER Linux》​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​列​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​址​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​得​​​​​​​:http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redpieces/abstracts/sg246388.html?Open
系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​ HMC 激​​​​​​​活​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​给​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​电​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​型​​​​​​​而​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​ SMS 来​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.3. 你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​吗​​​​​​​?

Nearly every modern-day operating system (OS) uses disk partitions, and Red Hat Enterprise Linux is no exception. When you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you may have to work with disk partitions. If you have not worked with disk partitions before (or need a quick review of the basic concepts), refer to 第 25 章 磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​简​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​ before proceeding.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​ OS 所​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​离​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
在​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​:
  • 有​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​[5]的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​
  • 有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​删​​​​​​​除​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​,因​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux。​​​​​​​

11.4. 你​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ CD-ROM 或​​​​​​​ DVD 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​吗​​​​​​​?

从​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​求​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​已​​​​​​​购​​​​​​​买​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux产​​​​​​​品​​​​​​​,或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​拥​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.5. 筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

注意

Make sure an installation CD (or any other type of CD) is not in your system's CD/DVD drive if you are performing a network-based installation. Having a CD in the drive may cause unexpected errors.
不​​​​​​​管​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​(NFS、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​HTTP)还​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​地​​​​​​​贮​​​​​​​存​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​络​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ NFS、​​​​​​​FTP、​​​​​​​HTTP 服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​台​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​内​​​​​​​容​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​独​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

注意

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​具​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​好​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​力​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ CD、​​​​​​​DVD、​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ ISO、​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​ NFS ISO 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​红​​​​​​​帽​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​议​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​和​​​​​​​报​​​​​​​告​​​​​​​任​​​​​​​何​​​​​​​与​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​相​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​介​​​​​​​质​​​​​​​(许​​​​​​​多​​​​​​​错​​​​​​​误​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​由​​​​​​​不​​​​​​​正​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​刻​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​造​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ boot: 提​​​​​​​示​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​(Itanium 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​:在​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​ elilo):
	linux mediacheck

注意

在​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​含​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ /location/of/disk/space。​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ FTP、​​​​​​​NFS 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​被​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​ /export/directory。​​​​​​​例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​,/location/of/disk/space 可​​​​​​​能​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​叫​​​​​​​ /var/isos 的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​, /export/directory 将​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ /var/www/html/rhel5。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​充​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​,执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​:
    • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ DVD:
      dd if=/dev/dvd of=/location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso
      这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ dvd 指​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ DVD 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​:
    • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ CD-ROM:
      dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso
      在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,cdrom 指​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​ CD 驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​,X 是​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​编​​​​​​​号​​​​​​​,从​​​​​​​ 1 开​​​​​​​始​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​推​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.5.1. 筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​ FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ FTP 和​​​​​​​ HTTP 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​, iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​回​​​​​​​路​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​公​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​格​​​​​​​式​​​​​​​:
  • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ DVD:
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
    在​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,/export/directory 将​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 作​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ CDROM:
    mount -o loop /location/of/disk/space/diskX.iso /export/directory/diskX/
    对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​ CDROM ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​重​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​,例​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​:
    mount -o loop /var/isos/disk1.iso /var/www/html/rhel5-install/disk1/
之​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,确​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​ /export/directory 目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ FTP 或​​​​​​​ HTTP 共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​,并​​​​​​​且​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​证​​​​​​​客​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​检​​​​​​​查​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​否​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​自​​​​​​​身​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​,然​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​再​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​准​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​子​​​​​​​网​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​他​​​​​​​机​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​访​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.5.2. 筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ NFS 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​说​​​​​​​,没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​挂​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ NFS 可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​足​​​​​​​够​​​​​​​了​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​ iso 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​移​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​ NFS 的​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
  • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ DVD:
    mv /location/of/disk/space/RHEL5.iso /export/directory/
  • 对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ CDROM:
    mv /location/of/disk/space/disk*.iso /export/directory/
在​​​​​​​ /etc/exports 里​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​保​​​​​​​ /export/directory 通​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​ NFS 输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​:
/export/directory client.ip.address(ro,no_root_squash)
要​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​出​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​:
/export/directory *(ro,no_root_squash)
启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​ NFS 守​​​​​​​护​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​里​​​​​​​,使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs start 命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​ NFS 已​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​,重​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​加​​​​​​​载​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​(在​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​运​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​ /sbin/service nfs reload)。​​​​​​​
根​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​《​​​​​​​Red Hat Enterprise Linux 部​​​​​​​署​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​南​​​​​​​》​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​测​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​ NFS 共​​​​​​​享​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

11.6. 筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

注意

硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​只​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ ext2、​​​​​​​ext3、​​​​​​​或​​​​​​​ FAT 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​ reiserfs,你​​​​​​​将​​​​​​​无​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO(或​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​)映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​是​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​精​​​​​​​确​​​​​​​复​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​所​​​​​​​需​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​(二​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​制​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​)存​​​​​​​放​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​某​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​后​​​​​​​,选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​就​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​把​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​向​​​​​​​那​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​筹​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​:
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​组​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​集​​​​​​​合​​​​​​​ — 从​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​(或​​​​​​​ DVD)中​​​​​​​创​​​​​​​建​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​,在​​​​​​​ Linux 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​下​​​​​​​命​​​​​​​令​​​​​​​(对​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​ DVD 只​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​次​​​​​​​):
    dd if=/dev/cdrom of=/tmp/file-name.iso
  • 使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​ — 把​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​些​​​​​​​映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​传​​​​​​​输​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
    在​​​​​​​试​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​这​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​帮​​​​​​​助​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​避​​​​​​​免​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​经​​​​​​​常​​​​​​​会​​​​​​​遇​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​问​​​​​​​题​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​执​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​前​​​​​​​校​​​​​​​验​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​完​​​​​​​整​​​​​​​性​​​​​​​,请​​​​​​​使​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​ md5sum 程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​(该​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​适​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​类​​​​​​​操​​​​​​​作​​​​​​​系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​版​​​​​​​本​​​​​​​)。​​​​​​​md5sum 程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​该​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​提​​​​​​​供​​​​​​​ ISO 映​​​​​​​像​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​服​​​​​​​务​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​找​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
除​​​​​​​此​​​​​​​之​​​​​​​外​​​​​​​,如​​​​​​​果​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​目​​​​​​​录​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​叫​​​​​​​ updates.img 的​​​​​​​文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​以​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​anaconda。​​​​​​​请​​​​​​​参​​​​​​​考​​​​​​​ anaconda RPM 软​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​包​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ install-methods.txt 文​​​​​​​件​​​​​​​来​​​​​​​获​​​​​​​取​​​​​​​关​​​​​​​于​​​​​​​各​​​​​​​种​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 的​​​​​​​途​​​​​​​径​​​​​​​,以​​​​​​​及​​​​​​​怎​​​​​​​样​​​​​​​应​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​更​​​​​​​新​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​


[5] 未​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​意​​​​​​​味​​​​​​​着​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​要​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​硬​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​上​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​可​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​空​​​​​​​间​​​​​​​还​​​​​​​没​​​​​​​有​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​数​​​​​​​据​​​​​​​划​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​成​​​​​​​块​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​您​​​​​​​为​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​时​​​​​​​,每​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​都​​​​​​​如​​​​​​​同​​​​​​​一​​​​​​​个​​​​​​​独​​​​​​​立​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​磁​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​驱​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​器​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​

第 12 章 在​​​​​​​ IBM System i 和​​​​​​​ IBM System p 上​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​行​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

This chapter explains how to perform a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation from the DVD/CD-ROM, using the graphical, mouse-based installation program. The following topics are discussed:
  • Becoming familiar with the installation program's user interface
  • 启​​​​​​​动​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​
  • 选​​​​​​​择​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​方​​​​​​​法​​​​​​​
  • 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​配​​​​​​​置​​​​​​​步​​​​​​​骤​​​​​​​(语​​​​​​​言​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​键​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​鼠​​​​​​​标​​​​​​​、​​​​​​​分​​​​​​​区​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​等​​​​​​​)
  • 结​​​​​​​束​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​

12.1. 图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​用​​​​​​​户​​​​​​​界​​​​​​​面​​​​​​​

If you have used a graphical user interface (GUI) before, you are already familiar with this process; use your mouse to navigate the screens, click buttons, or enter text fields.
You can also navigate through the installation using the keyboard. The Tab key allows you to move around the screen, the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through lists, + and - keys expand and collapse lists, while Space and Enter selects or removes from selection a highlighted item. You can also use the Alt+X key command combination as a way of clicking on buttons or making other screen selections, where X is replaced with any underlined letter appearing within that screen.
If you would like to use a graphical installation with a system that does not have that capability, such as a partitioned system, you can use VNC or display forwarding. Both the VNC and display forwarding options require an active network during the installation and the use of boot time arguments. For more information on available boot time options, refer to 第 15 章 IBM Power 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​其​​​​​​​它​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​选​​​​​​​项​​​​​​​

注意

If you do not wish to use the GUI installation program, the text mode installation program is also available. To start the text mode installation program, use the following command at the yaboot: prompt:
linux text
It is highly recommended that installs be performed using the GUI installation program. The GUI installation program offers the full functionality of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program, including LVM configuration which is not available during a text mode installation.
Users who must use the text mode installation program can follow the GUI installation instructions and obtain all needed information.

12.2. 引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ IBM System i 或​​​​​​​者​​​​​​​ IBM System p 安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​序​​​​​​​

要​​​​​​​从​​​​​​​光​​​​​​​盘​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​ IBM System i 或​​​​​​​ IBM System p 系​​​​​​​统​​​​​​​,你​​​​​​​必​​​​​​​须​​​​​​​在​​​​​​​ System Management Services (SMS) 菜​​​​​​​单​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​指​​​​​​​定​​​​​​​安​​​​​​​装​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​设​​​​​​​备​​​​​​​。​​​​​​​
要​​​​​​​进​​​​​​​入​​​​​​​图​​​​​​​形​​​​​​​化​​​​​​​的​​​​​​​ System Management Services,在​​​​​​​引​​​​​​​导​​​​​​​过​​​​​​​程​​​​​​​中​​​​​​​当​​​​​​​你​​​​​​​听​​​​​​​到​​​​​​​响​​​​​​​铃